Queensland schools are currently implementing: the Australian Curriculum for English, Mathematics, Science and History in Prep to Year 10, the Queensland curriculum for the remaining areas of the curriculum in Prep to Year 10, and the Queensland Senior schooling curriculum  for Years 11 & 12. The Australian Curriculum will gradually replace the Queensland curriculum. Queensland Government – Dept. of Education and Training

With this in mind, FutureSchool provides both the Australian Curriculum and the Queensland Curriculum for your family or school. This will remain in place until the full rollout and integration has been completed.

Whatever level your family, you can rest assured that FutureSchool will complement and work hand-in-hand with their current schoolwork.

For those schools that offer the International Baccalaureate or Cambridge International Examinations curricula, these are also available within FutureSchool as part of its standard curriculum library.

To see more detail about lessons covered within our subjects, just click on your state from the list:







Mathematics

QLD Preparatory Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Preparatory
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number The numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3 Time, days of week Days of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
4 Exam Exam – Preparatory
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 1 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 1
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number The numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3 Using and applying number The numbers 6 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects.
4 The number system Ordinal numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects.
5 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
6 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
7 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
8 Time, days of week Days of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
9 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
10 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
11 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
12 Time, duration Duration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
13 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
14 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
15 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
16 Exam Exam – Year 1 – Level 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 2 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 2
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
3 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
4 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
5 Using and applying number Using place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
6 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
7 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
8 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
9 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
10 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
11 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
12 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
13 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
14 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
15 Time, duration Duration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
16 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
17 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
18 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
19 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
20 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
21 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
22 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
23 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
24 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
25 Measurement – Advanced area Comparing and Ordering Areas
Objective: To estimate size order and count or estimate area as the number of cm squares
26 Exam Exam – Year 2 – Level 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 3 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 3
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
3 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
4 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
5 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
6 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
7 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
8 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
9 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
10 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
11 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
12 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
13 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
14 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
15 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
16 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
17 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
18 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
19 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
20 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
21 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
22 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
23 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
24 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
25 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
26 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
27 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
28 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
29 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
30 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
31 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
32 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
33 Calculation-multiples Multiples of 10 up to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten.
34 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
35 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
36 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
37 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
38 Exam Exam – Year 3 – Level 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 4 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 4
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
3 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
4 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
5 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
6 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
7 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
8 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
9 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
10 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
11 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
12 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
13 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
14 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
15 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
16 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
17 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
18 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
19 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
20 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
21 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
22 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
23 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
24 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
25 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
26 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
27 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
28 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
29 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
30 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
31 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
32 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
33 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
34 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
35 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
36 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
37 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
38 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
39 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
40 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
41 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
42 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
43 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
44 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
45 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
46 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
47 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
48 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
49 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
50 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
51 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
52 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
53 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
54 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
55 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
56 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
57 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
58 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
59 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
60 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
61 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
62 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
63 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
64 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
65 Exam Exam – Year 4 – Level 2
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 5 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 5
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
3 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
4 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
5 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
6 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
7 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
8 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
9 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
10 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
11 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
12 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
13 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
14 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
15 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
16 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
17 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
18 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
19 Place value The numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
20 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
21 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
22 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
23 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
24 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
25 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
26 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
27 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
28 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
29 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
30 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
31 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
32 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
33 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
34 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
35 Measurement – Advanced area Comparing and Ordering Areas
Objective: To estimate size order and count or estimate area as the number of cm squares
36 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
37 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
38 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
39 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
40 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
41 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
42 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
43 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
44 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
45 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
46 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
47 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
48 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
49 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
50 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
51 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
52 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
53 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
54 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
55 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
56 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
57 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
58 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
59 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
60 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
61 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
62 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
63 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
64 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
65 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
66 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
67 Exam Exam – Year 5 – Level 2
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 6 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 6
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
7 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
8 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
9 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
10 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
11 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
12 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
14 Multiplication Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
15 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
16 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
17 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
18 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
19 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
20 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
21 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
22 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
23 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
24 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
25 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
26 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
27 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
28 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
29 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
30 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
31 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
32 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
33 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
34 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
35 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
36 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
37 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
38 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
39 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
40 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
41 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
42 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
43 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
44 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
45 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
46 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
47 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
48 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
49 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
50 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
51 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
52 Measurement – Advanced area Comparing and Ordering Areas
Objective: To estimate size order and count or estimate area as the number of cm squares
53 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
54 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
55 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
56 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
57 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
58 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
59 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
60 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
61 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
62 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
63 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
64 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
65 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
66 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
67 Weight/mass The tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
68 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
69 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
70 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
71 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
72 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
73 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
74 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
75 Space Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
76 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
77 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
78 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
79 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
80 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
81 Graphs – Basic Column Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
82 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
83 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
84 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
85 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
86 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
87 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
88 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
89 Exam Exam – Year 6 – Level 3
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 7 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 7
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
7 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
8 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
9 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
10 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
11 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
12 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
14 Multiplication Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
15 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
16 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
17 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
18 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
19 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
20 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
21 Division/repeat subtraction Using divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method.
22 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
23 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
24 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
25 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
26 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
27 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
28 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
29 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
30 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
31 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
32 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
33 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
34 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
35 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
36 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
37 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
38 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
39 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
40 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
41 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
42 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
43 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
44 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
45 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
46 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
47 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
48 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
49 Measurement – Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
50 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
51 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
52 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
53 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
54 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
55 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
56 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
57 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
58 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
59 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
60 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
61 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
62 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
63 Weight/mass The tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
64 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
65 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
66 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
67 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
68 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
69 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
70 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
71 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
72 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
73 Space Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
74 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
75 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
76 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
77 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
78 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
79 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
80 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
81 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
82 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
83 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
84 Graphs – Basic Column Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
85 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
86 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
87 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
88 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
89 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
90 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
91 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
92 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
93 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
94 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
95 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
96 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
97 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
98 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
99 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
100 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
101 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
102 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
103 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
104 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
105 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
106 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
107 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
108 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
109 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
110 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
111 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
112 Exam Exam – Year 7 – Level 4
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 8 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 8
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6 Basic mathematics part 2 Subtraction involving four-digit numbers and beyond
Objective: To subtract 4 or 5-digit numbers from 5-digit numbers using the Renaming Method
7 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
8 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
11 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
12 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
14 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
15 Measurement – Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
16 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
17 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
18 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
19 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
20 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
21 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
22 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
23 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
24 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
25 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
26 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
27 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
28 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
29 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
30 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
31 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
32 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
33 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
34 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
35 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
36 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
37 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
38 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
39 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
40 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
41 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
42 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
43 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
44 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
45 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
46 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
47 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
48 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
49 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
50 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
51 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
52 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
53 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
54 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
55 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
56 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
57 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
58 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
59 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
60 Indices/Exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: To subtract indices when dividing powers of the same base
61 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
62 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
63 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
64 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
65 Graphs – Basic Column Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
66 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
67 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
68 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
69 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
70 Statistics part 1 Relative Frequency
Objective: To extend the frequency distribution table to include a relative frequency column
71 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
72 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
73 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
74 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
75 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
76 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
77 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
78 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
79 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
80 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
81 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
82 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
83 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
84 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
85 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
86 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
87 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
88 Weight/mass The tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
89 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
90 Space Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
91 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
92 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
93 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
94 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
95 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
96 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
97 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
98 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
99 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
100 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
101 Geometry-triangles Exterior angle theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions.
102 Special triangles Special triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
103 Geometry-quadrilaterals Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
104 Geometry part 1 Geometric Constructions
Objective: To bisect a line, bisect an angle and construct a perpendicular using a compass and ruler
105 Geometry To identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
106 Geometry part 3 Angles
Objective: To label and classify angles and calculate pronumeral values within angles
107 Geometry-constructions Angle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
108 Geometry part 2 Congruent triangles: Tests 1 and 2
Objective: To recognise congruent triangles and matching sides and angles using SSS and SAS
109 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
110 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
111 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
112 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
113 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
114 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
115 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
116 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
117 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
118 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
119 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
120 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
121 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
122 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
123 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
124 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
125 Algebra – Basic Solving Two-Step Equations
Objective: To solve two-step equations without division in the initial problem
126 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
127 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
128 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
129 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
130 Algebra – Basic Changing the Subject of the Formula
Objective: To change the subject of algebraic formulae using equation-solving techniques
131 Exam Exam – Year 8 – Level 5: Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 9 leading to A Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 9
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
3 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
4 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
5 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
6 Basic mathematics part 2 Subtraction involving four-digit numbers and beyond
Objective: To subtract 4 or 5-digit numbers from 5-digit numbers using the Renaming Method
7 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
8 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
11 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
12 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
13 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
14 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
15 Measurement – Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
16 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
17 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
18 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
19 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
20 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
21 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
22 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
23 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
24 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
25 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
26 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
27 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
28 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
29 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
30 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
31 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
32 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
33 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
34 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
35 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
36 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
37 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
38 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
39 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
40 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
41 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
42 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
43 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
44 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
45 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
46 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
47 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
48 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: To subtract decimals with a different number of decimal places
49 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
50 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
51 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
52 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
53 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
54 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
55 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
56 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
57 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
58 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
59 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
60 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
61 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
62 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
63 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
64 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
65 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
66 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
67 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
68 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
69 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
70 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
71 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
72 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
73 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
74 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
75 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
76 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
77 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
78 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
79 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
80 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
81 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
82 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
83 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
84 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
85 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
86 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
87 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
88 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
89 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
90 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
91 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
92 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
93 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
94 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
95 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
96 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
97 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
98 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
99 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
100 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
101 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
102 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
103 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
104 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
105 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
106 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
107 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
108 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
109 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
110 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
111 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
112 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
113 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
114 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
115 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
116 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
117 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
118 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
119 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
120 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
121 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
122 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
123 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
124 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
125 Exam Exam – Year 9 – Level 5: Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 9 leading to B and C Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 9
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
3 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
4 Measurement – Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
5 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
6 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
7 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
8 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
9 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
10 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
11 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
12 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
13 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
14 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
15 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
16 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
17 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
18 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
19 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
20 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
21 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
22 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
23 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
24 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
25 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
26 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
27 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
28 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
29 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
30 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
31 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
32 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
33 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
34 Fractions BODMAS
Objective: To calculate answers for fraction and mixed number questions using BODMAS
35 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
36 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
37 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
38 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
39 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
40 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
41 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
42 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
43 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
44 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
45 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
46 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
47 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
48 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
49 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
50 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
51 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
52 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
53 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
54 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
55 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
56 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
57 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
58 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
59 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
60 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
61 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
62 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
63 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
64 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
65 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
66 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
67 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
68 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
69 Geometry-triangles Exterior angle theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions.
70 Special triangles Special triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
71 Geometry-quadrilaterals Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
72 Geometry-constructions Geometric constructions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able complete constructions with a ruler and a pair of compasses.
73 Geometry To identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
74 Geometry – angles To determine angle labelling rules, naming angles according to size, angle bisector properties and related algebra
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will label angles, use a protractor and perform calculations using algebra involving angles.
75 Geometry-constructions Angle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
76 Geometry part 2 Congruent triangles: Tests 1 and 2
Objective: To recognise congruent triangles and matching sides and angles using SSS and SAS
77 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
78 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
79 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
80 Geometry part 2 Using Similar Triangles to Calculate Lengths
Objective: To determine unknown sides and angles of similar triangles
81 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
82 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
83 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
84 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
85 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
86 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
87 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
88 Trigonometry part 1 Using the Trigonometric Ratios to find unknown length [Case 1 Sin]
Objective: To use the sine ratio to calculate the opposite side of a right-angled triangle
89 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
90 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
91 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
92 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
93 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
94 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
95 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
96 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
97 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
98 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
99 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
100 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
101 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
102 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
103 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
104 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
105 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
106 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
107 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
108 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
109 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
110 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
111 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
112 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
113 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
114 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
115 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
116 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
117 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
118 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
119 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
120 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
121 Quadrilaterals Quadrilaterals 6
Objective: To establish the properties of quadrilaterals in the number plane
122 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
123 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
124 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
125 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
126 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
127 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
128 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
129 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
130 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
131 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
132 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
133 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
134 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
135 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
136 Factorisation Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods.
137 Algebraic fractions-binomial Cancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions.
138 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
139 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
140 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
141 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
142 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
143 Exam Exam – Year 9 – Level 5: Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 10 leading to A Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 10
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
3 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
4 Place value The numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
5 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
6 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
7 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
8 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
11 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
12 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
13 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
14 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
15 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
16 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
17 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
18 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
19 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
20 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
21 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
22 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
23 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
24 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
25 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
26 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
27 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
28 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
29 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
30 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
31 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
32 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
33 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
34 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
35 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
36 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
37 Multiplication Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication.
38 Multiplication Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 4-digit number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to be able to multiply any 4 digit number by any other 4 digit number using long multiplication.
39 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
40 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
41 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
42 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
43 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
44 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
45 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
46 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders.
47 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders.
48 Division/repeat subtraction Using divide, multiply and subtraction in the bring down method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use Long Division using the Divide, Multiply, Subtract and Bring Down method.
49 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
50 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
51 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
52 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
53 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
54 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
55 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
56 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
57 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
58 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
59 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
60 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
61 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
62 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
63 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
64 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
65 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
66 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
67 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
68 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
69 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
70 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
71 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
72 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
73 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
74 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
75 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
76 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
77 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
78 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
79 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
80 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
81 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
82 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
83 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
84 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
85 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
86 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
87 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
88 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
89 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
90 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
91 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
92 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
93 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
94 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
95 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
96 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
97 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
98 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
99 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
100 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
101 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
102 Absolute value or modulus Solving for the variable
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations involving a single absolute value.
103 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
104 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
105 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
106 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
107 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
108 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
109 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
110 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
111 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
112 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
113 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
114 Volume Composite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
115 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
116 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
117 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
118 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
119 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
120 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
121 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
122 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
123 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
124 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
125 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
126 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
127 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
128 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
129 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
130 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
131 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
132 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
133 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
134 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
135 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
136 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
137 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
138 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
139 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
140 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
141 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
142 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
143 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
144 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
145 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
146 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
147 Exam Exam – Year 10 – Level 6: Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 10 leading to B and C Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 10
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Measurement – Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
3 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
4 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
5 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
6 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
7 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
8 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
9 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
10 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
11 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
12 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
13 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
14 Surface area Surface Area of a Triangular/Trapezoidal Prism
Objective: To calculate the surface area of triangular and trapezoidal prisms
15 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
16 Surface area Surface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
17 Surface area Surface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
18 Surface area Surface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
19 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
20 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
21 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
22 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
23 Problem solving Word Problems with Money
Objective: To solve money word problems using + – x and /
24 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
25 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
26 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
27 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
28 Fractions BODMAS
Objective: To calculate answers for fraction and mixed number questions using BODMAS
29 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
30 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
31 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
32 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
33 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
34 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
35 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
36 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
37 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
38 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
39 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
40 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
41 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
42 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
43 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
44 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
45 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
46 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
47 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
48 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
49 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
50 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
51 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
52 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
53 Geometry part 1 Parallel Lines
Objective: To identify angle pairs and calculate angles formed by a transversal and parallel lines
54 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
55 Geometry problems More difficult exercises involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles in questions that are more difficult than previously completed. Students will also learn to use other geometric properties as well as set out log
56 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
57 Geometry-triangles Exterior angle theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the exterior angle of a triangle theorem to solve geometric questions.
58 Special triangles Special triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
59 Geometry-quadrilaterals Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
60 Geometry part 1 Geometric Constructions
Objective: To bisect a line, bisect an angle and construct a perpendicular using a compass and ruler
61 Geometry To identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
62 Geometry part 3 Angles
Objective: To label and classify angles and calculate pronumeral values within angles
63 Geometry-constructions Angle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
64 Geometry-polygons Angles of regular polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the angle sum of a polygon formula, and understand that the external angles of a polygon add up to 360 degrees.
65 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
66 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
67 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
68 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
69 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
70 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
71 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
72 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
73 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
74 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
75 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
76 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
77 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
78 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
79 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
80 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
81 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
82 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
83 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
84 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
85 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
86 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
87 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
88 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
89 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
90 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
91 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
92 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
93 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
94 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
95 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
96 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
97 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
98 Absolute value or modulus Solving for the variable
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations involving a single absolute value.
99 Absolute value or modulus Solving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
100 Graphs – Basic Column Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
101 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
102 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
103 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
104 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
105 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
106 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
107 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
108 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
109 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
110 Statistics part 1 Relative Frequency
Objective: To extend the frequency distribution table to include a relative frequency column
111 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
112 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
113 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
114 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
115 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
116 Statistics part 1 Calculating the Mean from a Frequency Distribution
Objective: To determine averages (mean, median and mode) from cumulative frequency polygons
117 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
118 Co-ordinate Geometry-Theorems Angles between two lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the angle between given lines and derive the equation of a line given its angle to another line.
119 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
120 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
121 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
122 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
123 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
124 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
125 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
126 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
127 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
128 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
129 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
130 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
131 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
132 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
133 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
134 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
135 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
136 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
137 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
138 Standard/Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: To interpret scientific notation by writing in base 10 numerals
139 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
140 Surds Some rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
141 Surds Simplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
142 Surds Creating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
143 Surds Adding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
144 Surds Expanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
145 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
146 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
147 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
148 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
149 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
150 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
151 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
152 Factorisation Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods.
153 Algebraic fractions-binomial Cancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions.
154 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
155 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
156 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
157 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
158 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
159 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
160 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
161 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
162 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
163 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
164 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
165 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
166 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
167 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
168 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
169 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
170 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
171 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
172 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
173 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
174 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
175 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
176 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
177 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
178 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
179 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
180 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
181 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
182 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
183 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
184 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
185 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
186 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
187 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
188 Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular lines Perpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
189 Exam Exam – Year 10 – Level 6: Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 A Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
3 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
4 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
5 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
6 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
7 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
8 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
9 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
10 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
11 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
12 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
13 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
14 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
15 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
16 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
17 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
18 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
19 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
20 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
21 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
22 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
23 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
24 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
25 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
26 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
27 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
28 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
29 Volume Composite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
30 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
31 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
32 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
33 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
34 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
35 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
36 Surface area Surface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
37 Surface area Surface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
38 Surface area Surface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
39 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
40 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
41 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
42 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
43 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
44 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
45 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
46 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
47 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
48 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
49 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
50 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
51 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
52 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
53 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
54 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
55 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
56 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
57 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
58 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
59 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
60 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
61 Absolute value or modulus Solving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
62 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
63 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
64 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
65 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
66 Geometric transformations The definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
67 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
68 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
69 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
70 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
71 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
72 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
73 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
74 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
75 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
76 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
77 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
78 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
79 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
80 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
81 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
82 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
83 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
84 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
85 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
86 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
87 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
88 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
89 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
90 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
91 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
92 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
93 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
94 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
95 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
96 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
97 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
98 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
99 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
100 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
101 Exam Exam – Year 11 – Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 B Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Graphing binomials Binomial products.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term binomial product and be capable of expanding and simplifying an expression.
3 Graphing binomials Binomial products with negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand specific terms and be prepared to expand and simplify different monic binomial products.
4 Graphing binomials Binomial products [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson, the student will have examined more complex examples with binomial products.
5 Squaring binomial Squaring a binomial. [monic]
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should understand the simple one-step process of squaring a monic binomial.
6 Algebra – Products and factors Squaring a Binomial (nonmonic)
Objective: To expand the square of a nonmonic binomial by inspection
7 Factorising Expansions leading to the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares.
8 Algebraic expressions-products Products in simplification of algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simplification of algebraic expressions in step-by-step processing.
9 Algebraic expressions-larger expansions Algebraic Expressions – Larger expansions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of expanding larger algebraic expressions.
10 Algebra-highest common factor Highest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
11 Geometry-circles The equation of a circle: to find radii of circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe a circle mathematically given its equation or its graph. Additionally, the student will be able to work out the equation of a circle given its centre and radius.
12 Geometry-circles The semicircle: to select the equation given the semi circle and vice versa
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to sketch a semicircle given its equation and derive the equation of a given semicircle.
13 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
14 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
15 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
16 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
17 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
18 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
19 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
20 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
21 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
22 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
23 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
24 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
25 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
26 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
27 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
28 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
29 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
30 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
31 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
32 Uniform motion Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
33 Uniform motion Using subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
34 Uniform motion Uniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
35 Uniform motion Uniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
36 Uniform motion Uniform Motion With Unequal Distances or Time
Objective: To solve motion problems where either distance or time are different
37 Uniform motion Uniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
38 Motion under acceleration Motion under gravity – objects in vertical motion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will convert rates and use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration.
39 Motion under acceleration Introducing initial velocity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration and an initial velocity.
40 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
41 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
42 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
43 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
45 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
46 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
47 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
48 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
49 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
50 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
51 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
52 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
53 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
54 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
55 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
56 Functions Parametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
57 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
58 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
59 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
60 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
61 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
62 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
63 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
64 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
65 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
66 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
67 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
68 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
69 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
70 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
71 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
72 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
73 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
74 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
75 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
76 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
77 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
78 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
79 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
80 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
81 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
82 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
83 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
84 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
85 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
86 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
87 Trig-reciprocal ratios Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
88 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
89 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
90 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
91 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
92 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
93 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
94 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
95 Graph reciprocals Graphing the trigonometric ratios – IV Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the curves of the reciprocal ratios: cosec, sec and cot.
96 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
97 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
98 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
99 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
100 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
101 Indices/Exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: To subtract indices when dividing powers of the same base
102 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
103 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
104 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
105 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
106 Indices/Exponents Fractional Indices
Objective: To evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices
107 Fractional indices/exponents Complex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
108 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
109 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
110 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
111 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
112 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
113 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
114 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
115 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
116 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
117 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
118 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
119 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
120 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
121 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
122 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
123 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
124 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
125 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
126 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
127 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
128 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
129 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
130 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
131 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
132 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
133 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
134 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
135 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
136 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
137 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
138 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
139 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
140 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
141 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
142 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
143 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
144 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
145 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
146 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
147 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
148 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
149 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
150 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
151 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
152 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
153 Probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: To use the nCr formula to solve problems where unordered selections occur
154 Exam Exam – Year 11 – Maths B
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 B and C Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 11
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Graphing binomials Binomial products.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term binomial product and be capable of expanding and simplifying an expression.
3 Graphing binomials Binomial products with negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand specific terms and be prepared to expand and simplify different monic binomial products.
4 Graphing binomials Binomial products [non-monic].
Objective: On completion of the lesson, the student will have examined more complex examples with binomial products.
5 Squaring binomial Squaring a binomial. [monic]
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should understand the simple one-step process of squaring a monic binomial.
6 Algebra – Products and factors Squaring a Binomial (nonmonic)
Objective: To expand the square of a nonmonic binomial by inspection
7 Factorising Expansions leading to the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand expansions leading to differences of 2 squares.
8 Algebraic expressions-products Products in simplification of algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simplification of algebraic expressions in step-by-step processing.
9 Algebraic expressions-larger expansions Algebraic Expressions – Larger expansions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of expanding larger algebraic expressions.
10 Algebra-highest common factor Highest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
11 Geometry-circles The equation of a circle: to find radii of circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe a circle mathematically given its equation or its graph. Additionally, the student will be able to work out the equation of a circle given its centre and radius.
12 Geometry-circles The semicircle: to select the equation given the semi circle and vice versa
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to sketch a semicircle given its equation and derive the equation of a given semicircle.
13 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
14 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
15 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
16 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
17 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
18 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
19 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
20 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
21 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
22 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
23 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
24 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
25 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
26 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
27 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
28 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
29 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
30 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
31 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
32 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
33 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
34 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
35 Uniform motion Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
36 Uniform motion Using subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
37 Uniform motion Uniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
38 Uniform motion Uniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
39 Uniform motion Uniform Motion With Unequal Distances or Time
Objective: To solve motion problems where either distance or time are different
40 Uniform motion Uniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
41 Motion under acceleration Motion under gravity – objects in vertical motion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will convert rates and use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration.
42 Motion under acceleration Introducing initial velocity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration and an initial velocity.
43 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
44 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
45 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
46 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
47 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
48 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
49 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
50 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
51 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
52 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
53 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
54 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
55 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
56 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
57 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
58 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
59 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
60 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
61 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
62 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
63 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
64 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
65 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
66 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
67 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
68 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
69 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
70 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
71 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
72 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
73 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
74 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
75 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
76 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
77 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
78 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
79 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
80 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
81 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
82 Trig-reciprocal ratios Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
83 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
84 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
85 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
86 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
87 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
88 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
89 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
90 Graph reciprocals Graphing the trigonometric ratios – IV Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the curves of the reciprocal ratios: cosec, sec and cot.
91 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
92 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
93 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
94 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
95 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
96 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
97 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
98 Fractional indices/exponents Complex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
99 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
100 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
101 Standard/Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: To interpret scientific notation by writing in base 10 numerals
102 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
103 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
104 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
105 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
106 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
107 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
108 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
109 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
110 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
111 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
112 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
113 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
114 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
115 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
116 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
117 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
118 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
119 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
120 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
121 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
122 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
123 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
124 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
125 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
126 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
127 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
128 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
129 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
130 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
131 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
132 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
133 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
134 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
135 Sequences and Series Applications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
136 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
137 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
138 Calculus – Computation volumes Computation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
139 Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules The Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
140 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
141 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
142 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
143 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
144 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
145 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
146 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
147 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
148 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
149 Probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: To use the nCr formula to solve problems where unordered selections occur
150 Number theory – sets Number sets and their members
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the notation used with sets and the subsets of the real number system.
151 Number theory – operations Properties of real numbers using addition and multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the closure, identity, commutative, associative, identity and distributive properties for addition and multiplication.
152 Number theory – equations Transformations that produce equivalent equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the correct terms to describe the processes in solving equations.
153 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
154 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
155 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
156 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
157 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
158 Translations Transformations – reflections
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to take a pre-image and using the appropriate techniques, accurately show its image after reflection.
159 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
160 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
161 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
162 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
163 Geometric transformations The definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
164 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
165 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
166 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
167 Logarithms-Complex numbers Absolute value
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the absolute value or modulus of complex numbers
168 Logarithms-Complex numbers Trigonometric form of a complex number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will write complex numbers in trigonometric or polar form. This may also be known as mod-ard form.
169 Logarithms-Complex numbers Multiplication and division of complex numbers in trig form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the trig form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
170 Logarithms-Complex numbers DeMoivre’s theorem (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find powers of complex numbers in trig form.
171 Logarithms-Complex numbers The nth root of real and complex numbers (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find roots of complex numbers in trig form.
172 Logarithms-Complex numbers Fundamental theorem of algebra (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and use the fundamental theorem of algebra to find factors for polynomials with real coefficients over the complex number field.
173 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
174 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
175 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
176 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
177 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
178 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
179 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
180 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
181 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
182 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
183 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
184 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
185 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
186 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
187 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
188 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
189 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
190 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
191 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
192 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
193 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
194 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
195 Trigonometry t Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
196 Exam Exam – Year 11 – Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 11 Prevocational Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Year 11 Prevocational
Objective: Assessment
2 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
3 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
4 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
5 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
6 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
7 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
8 Place value The numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
9 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
10 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
11 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
12 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
13 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
14 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
15 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
16 Basic mathematics part 2 Subtraction involving four-digit numbers and beyond
Objective: To subtract 4 or 5-digit numbers from 5-digit numbers using the Renaming Method
17 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
18 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
19 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
20 Measurement – Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: To read distances (km) from a map and calculate total distances between locations
21 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
22 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
23 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
24 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
25 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
26 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
27 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
28 Measurement – Volume Using the Cubic Metre to Measure Volume
Objective: To calculate the volume of rectangular prisms in cubic metres
29 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
30 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
31 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
32 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
33 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
34 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: To read and interpret problems involving money
35 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
36 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
37 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: To express a number on a thousand as a decimal in thousandths
38 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
39 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: To subtract decimals with a different number of decimal places
40 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
41 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
42 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
43 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
44 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
45 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
46 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
47 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
48 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
49 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
50 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
51 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
52 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
53 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
54 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
55 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
56 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
57 Weight/mass The tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
58 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
59 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
60 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
61 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
62 Fractions Mixed numerals
Objective: To name and recognise mixed numerals
63 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
64 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
65 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
66 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
67 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
68 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
69 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
70 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: To add and subtract fractions with the same denominator
71 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
72 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
73 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
74 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
75 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
76 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
77 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
78 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
79 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
80 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
81 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
82 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
83 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
84 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
85 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
86 Time Telling the time – minutes past the hour
Objective: To read analogue time to the minute past the hour
87 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
88 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
89 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
90 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
91 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
92 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
93 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
94 Space Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: To name prisms according to the shape of the base
95 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
96 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
97 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
98 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
99 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
100 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
101 Graphs – Basic Column Graphs
Objective: To read and interpret column graphs
102 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
103 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
104 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
105 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
106 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
107 Problem solving Word Problems with Money
Objective: To solve money word problems using + – x and /
108 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
109 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
110 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
111 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
112 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
113 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
114 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
115 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
116 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
117 Statistics part 1 Relative Frequency
Objective: To extend the frequency distribution table to include a relative frequency column
118 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
119 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
120 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
121 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
122 Exam Exam – Year 11 Prevocational
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 A Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
3 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
4 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
5 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
6 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
7 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
8 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
9 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
10 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
11 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
12 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
13 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
14 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
15 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
16 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
17 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
18 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
19 Surface area Surface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
20 Surface area Surface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
21 Surface area Surface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
22 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
23 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
24 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
25 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
26 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
27 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
28 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
29 Absolute value or modulus Solving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
30 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
31 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
32 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
33 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
34 Geometric transformations The definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
35 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
36 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
37 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
38 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
39 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
40 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
41 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
42 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
43 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
44 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
45 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
46 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
47 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
48 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
49 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
50 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
51 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
52 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
53 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
54 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
55 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
56 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
57 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
58 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
59 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
60 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
61 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
62 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
63 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
64 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
65 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
66 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
67 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
68 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
69 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
70 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
71 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
72 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
73 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
74 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
75 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
76 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
77 Exam Exam – Year 12 – Maths A
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 B Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
3 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
4 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
5 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
6 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
7 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
8 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
9 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
10 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
11 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
12 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
13 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
14 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
15 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
16 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
17 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
18 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
19 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
20 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
21 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
22 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
23 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
24 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
25 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
26 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
27 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
28 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
29 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
30 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
31 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
32 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
33 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
34 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
35 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
36 Functions Parametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
37 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
38 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
39 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
40 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
41 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
42 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
43 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
44 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
45 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
46 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
47 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
48 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
49 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
50 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
51 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
52 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
53 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
54 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
55 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
56 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
57 Trig-reciprocal ratios Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
58 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
59 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
60 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
61 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
62 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
63 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
64 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
65 Graph reciprocals Graphing the trigonometric ratios – IV Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the curves of the reciprocal ratios: cosec, sec and cot.
66 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
67 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
68 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
69 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
70 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
71 Indices/Exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: To subtract indices when dividing powers of the same base
72 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
73 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
74 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
75 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
76 Indices/Exponents Fractional Indices
Objective: To evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices
77 Fractional indices/exponents Complex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
78 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
79 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
80 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
81 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
82 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
83 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
84 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
85 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
86 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
87 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
88 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
89 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
90 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
91 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
92 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
93 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
94 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
95 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
96 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
97 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
98 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
99 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
100 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
101 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
102 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
103 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
104 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
105 Calculus – Computation volumes Computation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
106 Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules The Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
107 Exam Exam – Year 12 – Maths B
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 B and C Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – Year 12
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
3 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
4 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
5 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
6 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
7 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
8 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
9 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
10 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
11 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
12 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
13 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
14 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
15 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
16 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
17 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
18 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
19 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
20 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
21 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
22 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
23 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
24 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
25 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
26 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
27 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
28 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
29 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
30 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
31 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
32 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
33 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
34 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
35 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
36 Functions Parametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
37 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
38 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
39 Algebra-polynomials Polynomials and long division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the long division process with polynomials.
40 Remainder theorem The remainder theorem.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how the remainder theorem works and how it can be applied.
41 Remainder theorem More on remainder theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the remainder theorem and how it can be applied to solve some interesting questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
42 Factor theorem The factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the factor theorem and determine if a term in the form of x minus a is a factor of a given polynomial.
43 Factor theorem More on the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will fully understand the factor theorem and how it can be applied to solve some questions on finding unknown coefficients of polynomials.
44 Factor theorem Complete factorisations using the factor theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to factorise polynomials of a higher degree than 2 and to find their zeros.
45 Polynomial equations Polynomial equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of solving polynomial equations given in different forms.
46 Graphs, polynomials Graphs of polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to graph polynomials using the zeros of polynomials, the y intercepts and the direction of the curves.
47 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
48 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
49 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
50 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
51 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
52 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
53 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
54 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
55 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
56 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
57 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
58 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
59 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
60 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
61 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
62 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
63 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
64 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
65 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
66 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
67 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
68 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
69 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
70 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
71 Sequences and Series-Superannuation Superannuation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the method of finding the accumulated amount of a superannuation investment using the sum formula for a G.P.
72 Sequences and Series-Time payments Time payments.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have examined examples carefully and be capable of setting out the long method of calculating a regular payment for a reducible interest loan.
73 Sequences and Series Applications of arithmetic sequences
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of problems involving practical situations with arithmetic series.
74 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
75 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
76 Calculus – Computation volumes Computation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
77 Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules The Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
78 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
79 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
80 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
81 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
82 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
83 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
84 Number theory – sets Number sets and their members
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the notation used with sets and the subsets of the real number system.
85 Number theory – operations Properties of real numbers using addition and multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the closure, identity, commutative, associative, identity and distributive properties for addition and multiplication.
86 Number theory – equations Transformations that produce equivalent equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the correct terms to describe the processes in solving equations.
87 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
88 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
89 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
90 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
91 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
92 Translations Transformations – reflections
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to take a pre-image and using the appropriate techniques, accurately show its image after reflection.
93 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
94 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
95 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
96 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
97 Geometric transformations The definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
98 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
99 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
100 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
101 Logarithms-Complex numbers Absolute value
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the absolute value or modulus of complex numbers
102 Logarithms-Complex numbers Trigonometric form of a complex number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will write complex numbers in trigonometric or polar form. This may also be known as mod-ard form.
103 Logarithms-Complex numbers Multiplication and division of complex numbers in trig form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the trig form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
104 Logarithms-Complex numbers DeMoivre’s theorem (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find powers of complex numbers in trig form.
105 Logarithms-Complex numbers The nth root of real and complex numbers (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find roots of complex numbers in trig form.
106 Logarithms-Complex numbers Fundamental theorem of algebra (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and use the fundamental theorem of algebra to find factors for polynomials with real coefficients over the complex number field.
107 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
108 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
109 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
110 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
111 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
112 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
113 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
114 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
115 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
116 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
117 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
118 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
119 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
120 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
121 Conic sections Introduction to conic sections and their general equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the conic section from the coefficients of the equation.
122 Conic sections The parabola x. = 4ay
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the focus and directrix for a parabola given in standard form.
123 Conic sections Circles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify the radius of a circle given in standard form.
124 Conic sections Ellipses
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices and axes of an ellipse.
125 Conic sections Hyperbola
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will identify focus, vertices, axes and asymptotes of a hyperbola.
126 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
127 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
128 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
129 Trigonometry t Formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations using the t substitution.
130 Exam Exam – Year 12 – Maths B & C
Objective: Exam
Go to top

QLD Year 12 Prevocational Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Year 12 Prevocational
Objective: Assessment
2 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
3 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
4 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
5 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
6 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
7 Measurement – Advanced volume Composite Solids
Objective: To calculate the volume of composite figures using appropriate formulae
8 Fractions BODMAS
Objective: To calculate answers for fraction and mixed number questions using BODMAS
9 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
10 Surface area Surface Area of a Triangular/Trapezoidal Prism
Objective: To calculate the surface area of triangular and trapezoidal prisms
11 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
12 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
13 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
14 Special triangles Special triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify an equilateral and an isosceles triangle and solve geometry questions involving these triangles.
15 Geometry-quadrilaterals Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to find missing angles by using the fact that a quadrilateral’s angle sum is 360 degrees.
16 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
17 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
18 Uniform motion Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
19 Uniform motion Using subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
20 Uniform motion Uniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
21 Uniform motion Uniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
22 Uniform motion Uniform Motion With Unequal Distances or Time
Objective: To solve motion problems where either distance or time are different
23 Uniform motion Uniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
24 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
25 Statistics part 1 Calculating the Mean from a Frequency Distribution
Objective: To determine averages (mean, median and mode) from cumulative frequency polygons
26 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
27 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
28 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
29 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
30 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
31 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
32 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
33 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
34 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
35 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
36 Exam Exam – Year 12 Prevocational
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Literacy

Australian National Curriculum Foundation - Kindergarten Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 It’s time to learn your A B C! The Alphabet!
Objective: Students will practise reading the letters of the alphabet and practise recognition of: a, b, c, d, e, f.
2 It’s time to learn your A B C! 1 2 3 – It’s A B C!
Objective: Students will hear and practise saying the alphabet and the numbers 1-11.
3 It’s time to learn your A B C! How do you spell that?
Objective: Students will develop their letter recognition skills by listening to a conversation. They will be able to identify the letters by name.
4 It’s time to learn your A B C! It’s time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about asking and telling the time on the hour and half hour.
5 It’s time to learn your A B C! What time is it?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by listening to a conversation about asking and telling the time. They will practise using the key sentences.
6 It’s time to learn your A B C! ‘A’ sounds like …!
Objective: Students will listen to, discriminate between and practise the sounds of the letters a, b, c, d, e, f.
7 Hello! How are you? Hello! I’m Lulu.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which they will meet some new friends.
8 Hello! How are you? My name is Jack!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which new friends and new vocabulary are introduced.
9 Eight Purple Stars! Ten Little Pandas
Objective: Students will read a picture story and practise the numbers 1-10.
10 Eight Purple Stars! What colour is it?
Objective: Students will read and practise the words for basic colours. They will learn to answer the question: ‘What colour is …?’ and reply with ‘It’s …’.
11 Fun at School Close the door, please!
Objective: Students will develop their listening and speaking skills. They will read and hear a picture story, and practise classroom instructions.
12 Fun at School This is my father and mother.
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills. They will read a picture story and become familiar with ‘This is …’ and ‘That is …’.
13 What’s this? It’s my green eraser!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which some possessive pronouns are used. They will also become familiar with the questions: ‘What’s this?’ and ‘What’s that?’.
14 What’s this? What’s in the box?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn to ask and answer the question ‘Is it a …?’.
15 A New Boy at School A Letter from Peter
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also revise colours and numbers, and learn to talk about their families.
16 A New Boy at School Where’s my dog?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with some prepositions.
17 My Family Where’s the red kite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading and listening to a picture story. They will also practise the use of ‘in’, ‘on’ and ‘under’.
18 My Family My Family Tree
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about the family. They will increase their vocabulary for family relationships and occupations, and they will learn to use ‘this’ and ‘that’.
19 About People That’s his cow!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about occupations. They will also learn about the possessive adjectives ‘his’, ‘her’ and ‘their’.
20 About People These are my feet.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills and vocabulary by reading a text about the parts of the body. They will practise using ‘this’ and ‘these’, and learn to form plurals.
21 Animal Mania! What animal is that?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals. Students will practise asking and answering questions, and they will revise colours and numbers.
22 Animal Mania! A Very Tall Giraffe
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals in which more adjectives are used.
23 We like to play games. Holidays!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about fun activities to do in the holidays. Students will practise using ‘let’s’ and learn the days of the week.
24 We like to play games. What’s your favourite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about activities they like to do. They will learn to talk about their preferences.
25 Do you like hamburgers? At a Café
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about food preferences.
26 Do you like hamburgers? This is Bobby.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story. They will also learn to ask questions about likes and dislikes.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 1 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
2 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
3 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
4 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
5 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
6 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
7 Parts of Speech Part h Articles and Demonstratives
Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly.
8 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
9 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
10 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
11 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
12 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
13 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
14 It’s time to learn how to tell the time! No school! It’s Sunday!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about daily routines.
15 It’s time to learn how to tell the time! Where are my clothes?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about items of clothing. They will learn about the prepositions – ‘on’, ‘under’, ‘in’.
16 School and Play I have lots of subjects!
Objective: Students will practise reading, and saying words and simple sentences to describe school subjects and the days of the week.
17 School and Play On the Weekend
Objective: Students will practise reading and recognising simple sentences about weekend activities.
18 It’s Christmas time! It’s time for Maths!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text in which quarter past, quarter to, 5 past, 5 to, 10 past and 10 to the hour are used.
19 It’s Christmas time! Festivals are fun!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about Christmas and Chinese New Year.
20 I walk in the summer. The Seasons
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words to describe the seasons.
21 I walk in the summer. How do you go to school?
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words that describe modes of transport. They will also ask and answer questions about transport to different places.
22 What’s the weather like today? Have you got a ‘W’?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which ‘have got’ is used. They will also revise the letters of the alphabet and learn some new ones.
23 What’s the weather like today? It’s a sunny day!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about the weather.
24 What are you doing now? Shhhh! Dad is sleeping!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used.
25 What are you doing now? We are having a picnic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to ask and answer questions.
26 They’re usually in the lounge room. Hide and Seek
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about finding people.
27 They’re usually in the lounge room. An Unusual Day
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the simple present and the continuous present tenses are used. They will also learn the little words that help to sequence a story.
28 Left! Right! Let’s go! Where’s the shop?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which simple directions are given using the imperative.
29 Left! Right! Let’s go! Ladies and Gentlemen!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to talk about a concert.
30 Up, down and around we go! Roller-coaster Ride
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which routes are described using the present continuous tense.
31 Up, down and around we go! Catch that car!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story which focuses on street directions and places.
32 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
33 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
34 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
35 Basic Dictionary Use Basic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
36 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
37 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 2 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
2 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
3 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
4 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
5 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
7 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
8 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
9 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
10 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
11 Spelling Skills Syllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
12 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
13 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
14 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
15 We’re very busy. Fast Food
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading what Peter and Chen say about fast food. They will also practise using the present tense, and asking and answering questions using ‘do’.
16 We’re very busy. On the farm
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading, in which the present continuous tense is used.
17 I can’t do that! This is a great park!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a story about a park. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘this’ and ‘these’ for things that are near and ‘that’ and ‘those’ for things that are far away.
18 I can’t do that! I can speak English!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short speech about what a person ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ do.
19 Can I look at your new kite? Can I help you?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text using ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ to make offers and requests.
20 Can I look at your new kite? I’ve got a secret!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘has’ and ‘have got’ are used to talk about possessions.
21 Oh, no! Not the Doctor! Doctor, what have I got?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text about illnesses.
22 Oh, no! Not the Doctor! There is a zoo in Sydney!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘There is’ and ‘There are’ in relation to zoo animals is used.
23 It’s all in the future! One World, One Dream
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to talk about the future.
24 It’s all in the future! You are going to have a great time!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to make future plans.
25 Maybe she’ll be funny! My animal friends are wonderful!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will revise adjectives that describe personality.
26 Maybe she’ll be funny! What will Fido do next?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ to express a future action.
27 First we’ll see a big city. Sydney: It’s special!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will focus on the use of adjectives to describe cities.
28 First we’ll see a big city. Then we’ll eat it!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ when describing a process.
29 We need to take a metal pan. What’s it made of?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about what things are made of. They will also revise prepositions of location.
30 We need to take a metal pan. They want to go camping.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about a camping trip. They will also become familiar with the terms ‘need to’ and ‘want to’.
31 First we’ll go to the eighth floor. Let’s make pancakes!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, an illustrated recipe. They will also revise words that help them tell a story – ‘First’, ‘Then’, ‘Next’, ‘After that’ and ‘Finally’.
32 First we’ll go to the eighth floor. Who’s shopping at Sunsets?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about shopping in a department store. They will also revise some prepositions and learn some more in simple phrases.
33 On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. Whose Shoes?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture poem about shopping. They will also revise colours and pronouns.
34 On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. Chen’s Holiday Plans
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short story about Chen’s plans for his holidays. They will also practise verbs.
35 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
36 Basic Dictionary Use Basic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
37 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 3 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
2 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
3 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
4 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
5 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
6 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
8 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
9 Contractions Contractions
Objective: To identify and use contractions.
10 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
11 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
12 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
13 Thanks and goodbye Time clauses
Objective: Learn how to use time clauses.
14 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
15 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
16 Simple and Compound Verbs Simple and Compound Verbs
Objective: To identify and use simple and compound verbs.
17 Auxiliary Verbs Auxiliary Verbs
Objective: To identify and use auxiliary verbs within compound verbs.
18 Regular and Irregular Verbs Regular and Irregular Verbs
Objective: To identify and use regular and irregular verbs in the present and past tense.
19 Verbs – Infinitives Verbs – Infinitives
Objective: To identify and use the infinitive form of the verb.
20 What’s Homestay? Simple Present
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the simple present.
21 Setting off Present perfect
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the present perfect.
22 Amazing Aussie animals Present continuous
Objective: Learn about the present continuous tense.
23 Amazing Aussie animals Past continuous
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
24 Big day out! The future with ‘will’ and ‘going to’
Objective: Learn the uses of ‘will’ and ‘going to’ to talk about the future.
25 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
26 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
28 Thanks and goodbye Talking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
29 What do you like to do? Adverbs of frequency
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
30 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
31 Vowels and Consonants Vowels and Consonants
Objective: To identify and use vowels and consonants.
32 Vowels Vowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
33 Plurals Plurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
34 Plurals Plurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
35 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
36 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
37 What do you like to do? Expressing likes and dislikes
Objective: Present phrases used to express likes and dislikes.
38 Other Places and Other Times A New Penfriend
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehensions skills by reading a letter of introduction to a penfriend. They will also practise the present continuous tense and become familiar with vocabulary about different nationalities.
39 Other Places and Other Times Will we have robots?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the future tense is used.
40 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
41 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
42 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 4 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
3 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
4 Thanks and goodbye Talking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
5 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
6 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
7 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
8 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
9 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
10 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11 BBQ Party! Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
12 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
13 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
14 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
15 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
16 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
17 A new home Prepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
18 Here we are! Adjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
19 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
20 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
21 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
22 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
23 A new home Prepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
24 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
26 Vowels Vowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
27 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
28 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
29 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
30 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
31 Adjectives Adjectives – from Nouns and Verbs
Objective: To create adjectives from nouns and verbs. E.g. China – Chinese
32 Adjectives Adjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives
Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives.
33 Here we are! Comparatives and superlatives
Objective: Learn how to use comparatives and superlatives in English.
34 Setting off Questions
Objective: Learn the correct structure for forming yes/no questions. Learn the correct structure for forming wh questions.
35 Here we are! Asking for repetition
Objective: Learn how to ask someone to repeat something in English.
36 A new home Offers and requests
Objective: Present the phrases used to make offers and requests.
37 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
38 There weren’t many … There weren’t any flowers!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the simple past tense of the verb ‘to be’.
39 There weren’t many … A Shopping List
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise asking questions using ‘How much …’ and ‘How many …’.
40 It couldn’t be mine! Uncle Bill said we could!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’ to refer to past events.
41 It couldn’t be mine! The Riding Lesson
Objective: Students will build vocabulary, answer comprehension questions and practise using possessive pronouns and adjectives.
42 Clean up Australia! Too much rubbish!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
43 Clean up Australia! Sports Report
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using the adverbs ‘well’ and ‘badly’.
44 Friends all over the World Now I can do it by myself.
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills. They will practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
45 Friends all over the World A Letter to a Pen Pal
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their comprehension skills and practise using the simple present tense.
46 What’s the problem? What’s the matter?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a passage in which words are used to describe feelings.
47 What’s the problem? A School Outing
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a notice. They will learn about the use of ‘should’ and ‘shouldn’t’.
48 When I was Young Life used to be different.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, an interview. They will learn how to describe finished activities using ‘used to’.
49 When I was Young Have you tidied your room?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will also learn the imperfect tense and its use.
50 Space and Time We’ve done our research.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn some irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
51 Space and Time We’ve written a poem!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will learn more irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
52 Choices and Places A New Jacket
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which preferences are discussed and comparisons are made.
53 Choices and Places He has travelled a lot.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the present perfect and the simple past tenses are used.
54 What’s the best way to do it? A Text Message
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text which focuses on the use of ‘have to’ and adverbs of time.
55 What’s the best way to do it? What will we make?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the children discuss a project.
56 Class Camp Dear Parents, …
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which uses a variety of verb tenses.
57 Class Camp A Postcard from Kate
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading an informal letter in which the simple past tense of the verb is used.
58 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
59 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
61 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
62 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
63 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
64 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
65 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
66 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
67 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
68 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
69 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
70 Capitalisation Capital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
71 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
72 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
73 Common Errors Common Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
74 Common Errors Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
75 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
76 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
77 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 5 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
3 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
4 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
6 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
7 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
8 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
9 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
10 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
12 Thanks and goodbye Adjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
13 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
14 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
15 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
16 Plurals Plurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o'; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
17 Plurals Plurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
18 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
19 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
22 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
23 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
24 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
25 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
26 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
27 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
28 There’s a … It’s famous!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the verb ‘to be’.
29 There’s a … There are lots of things in my town.
Objective: Students will increase their reading comprehension skills and their vocabulary. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘There is …’ and ‘There are …’.
30 Hobbies and Festivals Collecting things
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and increase their vocabulary. They will learn the verb ‘to have’. They will also learn to use ‘this’ and ‘these’ correctly.
31 Hobbies and Festivals My favourite festival
Objective: Students will build vocabulary; begin to use conjunctions ‘and’, ‘but’ or ‘because’.
32 What can you do? Letter to a penfriend
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand an informal letter and use the present tense of ‘can’ and ‘can’t’.
33 What can you do? Have you got everything?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a written text using ‘have’, ‘haven’t got’, ‘but’ or ‘and’.
34 A visit to the Zoo About Koalas
Objective: Students will be able to answer questions about the text, identify the target language point ‘like’ + the infinitive) and distinguish between simple facts and opinions.
35 A visit to the Zoo I’m a zookeeper.
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions on reading, increase their vocabulary and use the frequency adverbs, ‘always’, ‘sometimes’, ‘often’ and ‘never’.
36 What do you want to do? Big Dreams
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions, increase their vocabulary and be able to use ‘want’ + the infinitive in positive and negative sentences, and in a question.
37 What do you want to do? Fruit Bowl
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand the text, to answer questions and to notice the use of the imperative form.
38 It’s going to be fun! It’s going to be fantastic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a story. They will learn how to talk about the future using the verb ‘to go + the infinitive’.
39 It’s going to be fun! What’s on the menu?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading various menus. They will also learn to ask questions politely.
40 We are all doing things! I’m having a great time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which focuses on the use of the present continuous tense.
41 We are all doing things! Who can help me?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which requests for help are made.
42 To Australia and Back! Getting There!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about travel plans. They will also learn about coordinate conjunctions.
43 To Australia and Back! I came back!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which Chen talks about going home to China. They will also revise the simple past tense.
44 Famous People Bruce Lee
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Bruce Lee. They will also practise the use of the simple past tense and learn more irregular verbs.
45 Famous People Alexander Bell
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Alexander Bell. They will also learn how to use ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’, and review questions using ‘Wh’ words.
46 Finding Buster! Finding Buster! – A Movie Review
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills and increase their vocabulary by reading a movie review. They will also learn how to use the conjunction ‘because’ to answer ‘why’ questions.
47 Finding Buster! I’m going to be busy!
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills by reading a story about plans for the weekend. They will revise the use of the verb ‘to go’ in the present tense + the infinitive to talk about the future.
48 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
49 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
50 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
51 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
52 Capitalisation Capital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
53 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
54 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
55 Common Errors Common Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
56 Common Errors Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
57 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
58 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
59 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
61 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
62 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
63 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
64 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 6 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
2 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
3 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
4 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
5 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6 Mass and Count Nouns Determiners
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
7 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
8 Verb tense – Compound Verb tense – Compound
Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb.
9 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
10 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
11 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
12 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
13 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
14 Spelling Skills Syllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
15 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
16 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
17 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
18 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
19 Gerunds Gerunds
Objective: To identify and use gerunds.
20 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
21 Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
22 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
23 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
24 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
25 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
26 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
30 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
31 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
32 Have you met? Hello!
Objective: Use the present tense verb to be (am, is and are) correctly in written and spoken work. Answer comprehension questions and apply am, is and are correctly.
33 Have you met? The world in a classroom!
Objective: At the end of this lesson, students will have learnt how to ask a question in English, and how to use the definite and indefinite articles.
34 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
35 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
36 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
37 Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
38 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
39 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
40 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
41 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
42 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 7 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
2 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
4 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
6 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
7 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
8 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
9 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
10 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
11 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
12 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
13 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
14 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
15 Interjections Interjections
Objective: To identify and use interjections correctly.
16 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
17 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
18 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
19 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
20 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
21 Big day out! First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
22 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
23 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
24 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
25 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
26 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
27 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
28 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
29 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
30 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
31 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 8 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
2 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
3 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
4 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
5 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
6 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
7 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
8 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
9 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
10 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
11 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
12 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
13 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
14 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
15 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
16 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
17 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
20 Plurals Plurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
21 Plurals Plurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
22 Plurals Plurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o'; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
23 Plurals Plurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
24 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
26 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
27 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
28 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
29 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
30 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
31 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
32 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
33 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
34 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
35 Antonyms and Synonyms Antonyms and Synonyms
Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms.
36 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
37 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
38 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 9 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
2 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
3 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
4 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
5 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6 Big day out! First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
7 BBQ Party! Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
8 Mass and Count Nouns Determiners
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
9 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
10 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
11 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
12 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
13 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
14 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
15 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
16 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
17 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
22 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
23 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
24 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
25 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
26 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
27 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
30 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
31 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
32 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
33 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
34 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 10 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
2 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
4 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
5 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
8 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
9 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
10 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
11 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
12 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
13 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
14 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
15 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
16 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
17 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top